Panasonic KX-TDA100 Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Panasonic Manuals
  4. PBX
  5. HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100
  6. Programming manual

Panasonic KX-TDA100 Programming Manual

Hybrid ip-pbx, pc programming manual
Hide thumbs Also See for KX-TDA100:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Pc Programming Manual , Feature Manual
PC Programming Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100
Model No.
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-TDA100

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-TDA100

  • Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later...

  • Page 2: Safety Notices

    Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
  • Page 3 Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX.
  • Page 4 Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://www.doc.panasonic.de...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................11 Introduction ........................12 1.1.1 Introduction ........................12 1.1.2 Entering Characters .......................13 PC Programming ......................17 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............17 1.2.2 Password Security ......................20 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..........21 Introduction ........................22 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes .............22 2.1.2...
  • Page 6 Utility—Error Log ......................75 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) ................77 2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) ........................78 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................79 2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report ..................80 2.6.13...
  • Page 7 Table of Contents 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) ......................296 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type ................297 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port ................302 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command ........309 3.33...
  • Page 8 Table of Contents [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign ................504 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate ................505 [3-2] User Group ......................506 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ....................507 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting ................509 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group ......................510 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting ..................512 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager ................513 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ........515...
  • Page 9 [10-5] Miscellaneous .....................833 13 [11] Maintenance ..................835 13.1 [11-1] Main ........................836 13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access ...................855 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ....856 14 Appendix ....................857 14.1 Revision History ......................858 14.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx ............858 14.1.2 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ............860...
  • Page 10 Table of Contents PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 11: Overview

    Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 12: Introduction

    1.1.1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements.

  • Page 13: Entering Characters

    1.1.2 Entering Characters 1.1.2 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 14 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 15 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 16 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 17: Pc Programming

    1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console. This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable.
  • Page 18 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console • Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX (including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
  • Page 19 Replacement may take several minutes to complete. Follow the procedure described in Section 2.16.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDA600), Section 2.14.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 2.13.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDA30) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.

  • Page 20: Password Security

    1.2.2 Password Security 1.2.2 Password Security To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform. The following types of system passwords are available: Password Description...

  • Page 21: Introduction Of Maintenance Console

    Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 22: Introduction

    2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes. • Batch mode Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX.
  • Page 23 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Connection Settings for RS-232C Setting Values Explanation Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed. Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, Specify the speed of data 57600, 115200 transmission.
  • Page 24 Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address of 3.44 [1-1] Slot— Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only). Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN.

  • Page 25: Access Levels

    2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows: Item Length User Level Programmer Code...
  • Page 26 2.1.2 Access Levels File Menu Option Batch Interactive Close ü ü ü Save ü ü ü Save As ü ü ü Exit ü ü ü ü ü ü Disconnect Menu Option Batch Interactive Disconnect ü ü ü Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive SD memory backup...
  • Page 27 ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü ü ü T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/ ü KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ ü KX-TDA600) E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü...
  • Page 28 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive ü System Reset®Reset by the Command Flash ROM ID Information ü View Menu Option Batch Interactive Toolbar ü ü ü ü ü ü Statusbar ü ü ü ü ü ü System Menu ü ü...

  • Page 29: Software Interface

    2.1.3 Software Interface 2.1.3 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below: Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.
  • Page 30 2.1.3 Software Interface • Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.8 Tool —Extension List View. These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position. It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released there.
  • Page 31 2.1.3 Software Interface Main Screen Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above. For details, see Sections Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance. Standard Buttons and Elements There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console. The standard buttons are as follows: Button Function...

  • Page 32: Card Status

    2.1.4 Card Status 2.1.4 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes).

  • Page 33: Display Options

    2.1.5 Display Options 2.1.5 Display Options The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. • View – Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. – Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. –...

  • Page 34: Extension Number Setting

    2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.

  • Page 35: Start Menu

    Use only when necessary. To create a new system data file From the start menu, select New. Click the appropriate model number. Select whether an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed or not. Click OK. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 36: Start Menu-Open

    2.2.2 Start Menu—Open 2.2.2 Start Menu—Open Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode. When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.

  • Page 37: Start Menu-Connect-Rs-232C

    2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C 2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 38: Start Menu-Connect-Usb

    2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB 2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT. To connect to the PBX by USB From the start menu, select Connect. The Login window will be displayed.

  • Page 39: Start Menu-Connect-Lan

    Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX. A CTI-LINK card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or IP-GW4 card (KX-TDA30) must be installed and the IP address of the PBX set to use this feature. For more details, see 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) and 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway...

  • Page 40: Start Menu-Connect-Modem

    2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem 2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem. To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 41: Start Menu-Connect-Isdn Remote

    2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX. This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and Remote —ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 13.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.

  • Page 42: Start Menu-Connect-Profile Setup

    2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs.

  • Page 43: File

    2.3.1 File—Close 2.3 File 2.3.1 File—Close Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the start menu. To close a system data file • From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.

  • Page 44: File-Save

    2.3.2 File—Save 2.3.2 File—Save Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 45: File-Save As

    2.3.3 File—Save As 2.3.3 File—Save As Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 46: File-Exit

    2.3.4 File—Exit 2.3.4 File—Exit Closes the Maintenance Console. To exit the Maintenance Console • From the File menu, select Exit If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. •...

  • Page 47: Disconnect

    2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect 2.4 Disconnect 2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup). To disconnect From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.

  • Page 48: Tool

    2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup 2.5 Tool 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen. To back up system data • From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 49: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration

    2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.

  • Page 50: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear

    2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

  • Page 51: Tool-Dxdp All Ous

    2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS 2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS. Click OK. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 52: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Delete All Recording

    2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording 2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded to SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX. To delete voice messages From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording. Select the card from which to delete messages.

  • Page 53: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Check Current Usage

    2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage 2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage Displays information on the voice messages stored in SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed. To view SVM message status •...

  • Page 54: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group

    2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool •...

  • Page 55: Tool-Extension List View

    2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail...

  • Page 56: Tool-Import

    2.5.9 Tool—Import 2.5.9 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.5.10 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
  • Page 57 2.5.9 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Exception...
  • Page 58 For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.

  • Page 59: Tool-Export

    For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.

  • Page 60: Tool-Screen Customize-User Level/Administrator Level

    2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level 2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.

  • Page 61: Utility

    DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT16 Card CT Bus diagnosis (KX-TDA100/ DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, KX-TDA200 only) CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT16...
  • Page 62 Click Save. • Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen. Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk port can be carried out successfully. The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16 or EMSLC16, CSLC16, or ECSLC24 card.
  • Page 63 • To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 3.16 [1-1] Slot —Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) to "Enable". • The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
  • Page 64 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis Select the Loopback Type option. A new window will be displayed. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card. Click Apply.

  • Page 65: Utility-File Transfer Pc To Pbx (Sd Card)

    Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PSMPR PSMPR_S PSMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PSMPR_S" KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PMPR PMPR_SUB PMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PMPR_SUB".
  • Page 66 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) LPR Program KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PSVOIPEX IP-EXT4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PCSINF CSIF PDHLC DHLC8, DLC8, DLC16 PSLC SLC8 PCSLC CSLC16 E&M PBRI...
  • Page 67 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) CS Program Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit PCSDECT CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PDCSDECT CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station...
  • Page 68 DSISLCLC SLC4/SLC8 DSIDLC DLC4/DLC8 DSIBRI BRI1/BRI2 DSILCOT LCOT2/LCOT4 DSIEIO DPH2/DPH4 DSIIPGW IP-GW4 DSIDID DID3 DSIE1 DSIIPEXT IP-EXT4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DINI DIDHLC DHLC8 DISLC SLC8/CSLC16 DIDLC DLC8/DLC16 DIBRI DICSINF CSIF DILCOT LCOT8/LCOT16 DIT1 DIE1 DIEM E&M...
  • Page 69 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DIPRI30 PRI30 DISLCLC SLC16 DIDID DID8 DIIPEXT IP-EXT16 KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DLINI EMPR DLIDHLC DHLC8 DLISLC SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16, ECSLC24 DLIDLC DLC8/DLC16 DLIBRI...

  • Page 70: Utility-File Transfer Pbx (Sd Card) To Pc

    This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name File Type DSSYS (KX-TDA30) System Data DSYS (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) DLSYS (KX-TDA600) $SYSERR Error Data $SYSERR1–$SYSERR9 DSKEYSD (KX-TDA30)

  • Page 71: Utility-Sd Card File View And Load

    2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards (cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs). This option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 72: Utility-Sd Card File Delete

    This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-TDA30: PSMPR, DSSYS, DSKEYSD KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR, DSYS, DKEYSD KX-TDA600: PLMPR, DLSYS, DLKEYSD To delete files from the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.

  • Page 73: Utility-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx

    This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG/ESVM card must be set to OUS status.

  • Page 74: Utility-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc

    This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG/ESVM card must be set to OUS status.

  • Page 75: Utility-Error Log

    2.6.8 Utility—Error Log 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows: Button Function...
  • Page 76 KX-TDA30: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01: Fixed slot, 02 to 04: Free slot type A, 05 to 07: Free slot type B, 08 to 11: Option slot) KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 06: Free slot) KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 11: Free slot) KX-TDA600: •...

  • Page 77: Utility-T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (For Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (For Kx-Tda30)

    2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits.

  • Page 78: Utility-T1/E1 Line Trace (For Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600) / E1 Line Trace (For Kx-Tda30)

    Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or E1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

  • Page 79: Utility-Isdn/Qsig Protocol Trace

    2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS status.

  • Page 80: Utility-Digital Trunk Error Report

    2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report 2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.

  • Page 81: Utility-Ip Extension Statistical Information

    2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information 2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset. Port No.

  • Page 82: Utility-Cs Information

    When an extension number is not registered, the display shows "OFF". 2.4 GHz PSs can use up to 3 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). DECT PSs can use up to 4 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). When using high-density CSs, DECT PSs can use up to 8 paths.

  • Page 83: Utility-Ps Information

    2.6.15 Utility—PS Information 2.6.15 Utility—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No. PS location number. Only registered PSs will be displayed. Extension Number Extension number of the PS.

  • Page 84: Utility-Timed Update

    2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update 2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 85: Utility-System Reset-Reset By The Command

    Backup main system data file PSMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of the PBX. PSMPR_S Backup PBX program file KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 File Name Description DSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX.
  • Page 86 2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command To update system files and reset the PBX From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command. Choose whether to back up current system data or not. • Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before proceeding.

  • Page 87: Utility-Flash Rom Id Information

    2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information 2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management. This option is only available in some countries/areas. To view the Flash ROM ID • From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information.

  • Page 88: Help

    Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX? • Is the USB driver on the PC running? To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver •...
  • Page 89 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem. • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main. • Has a modem been installed to the PBX? •...
  • Page 90 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set to "OUS"/"INS" together. I cannot change an LCO port to INS status. • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? •...
  • Page 91 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old FCO. • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location. If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
  • Page 92 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any extensions (see 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
  • Page 93 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I cannot change a feature number. • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: •...
  • Page 94 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
  • Page 95 How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG? • From the 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".
  • Page 96 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Headset OFF/ON on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen to "Headset ON". What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port? • XDP Mode on the 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen to "On".
  • Page 97 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group? • Perform the following steps: On the 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.
  • Page 98 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 99: [1] Configuration

    Section 3 [1] Configuration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 100: 1-1] Slot

    3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.1 [1-1] Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot —Summary).
  • Page 101 Move the mouse pointer over the card. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Option Card. The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 3.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only). Supported Card Types KX-TDA30 Maximum...
  • Page 102 DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Lamp Card Extension Type KX-TDA100: 6 SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDA200: 8 Extension Card SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card...
  • Page 103 CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card KX-TDA100: 1 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - KX-TDA200: 1 CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200 Installation Manual. KX-TDA600 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming...
  • Page 104 PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels) T1: T-1 Trunk Card 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) E1: E-1 Trunk Card 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM...
  • Page 105 VoIP Gateway Card Gateway IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 1 (can only be installed in 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - the Basic Shelf)

  • Page 106: 1-1] Slot-Summary

    3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. For the KX-TDA600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to view. Indicates the slot number (reference only). Value Range Available slot numbers.
  • Page 107 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Card Type for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card...
  • Page 108 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type...
  • Page 109 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary For IP-EXT16 cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is shown on the left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows: (Example) 1.002 / 1.001 For IP-EXT4 cards, only the VoIP version is displayed. Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 110: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Mpr

    MEC/EMEC card properties can be viewed and set. Memory Expansion Card: Indicates whether an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is mounted on the MPR (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMPR (KX-TDA600) card. To change the EMEC or MEC card installation status, click on this cell, then click OK in the dialogue box that appears.
  • Page 111 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.8 Software Upgrading PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 112: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Extension Type

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or not.
  • Page 113 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
  • Page 114 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 115 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. This setting is only available with MSLC/EMSLC cards. PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 116 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.1 Message Waiting Optional Equipment (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Indicates whether an Extension Caller ID card is mounted on the SLC8 card (reference only). This is only available with SLC8 cards. Value Range None, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type...
  • Page 117 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 118: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
  • Page 119 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/ESLC/EMSLC/CSLC/ECSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)

  • Page 120: Extension Number

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows: •...

  • Page 121: Extension Name

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 122: Parallel Telephone Ringing

    KX-TDA200] or 64 [with the KX-TDA600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 2 [with the KX-TDA30] or 8 [with the KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600] PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 123 SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Location number for DSS Console: 1–4 Location number for PC Console: 1, 2 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: Location number for DSS Console: 1–64 Location number for PC Console: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 124 Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to VM (DPT). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group...
  • Page 125 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.4 Headset Operation Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (XDP), S-Hybrid(SLT) or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).

  • Page 126: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Connection Command

    3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection Command Commands for the extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 127: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Port Type View

    KX-TDA30, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are connected; with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.

  • Page 128: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
  • Page 129 Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS. Maintenance Console Location 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the name of the CSIF port.
  • Page 130 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 131: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/ Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port— Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed. Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service. Value Range Not applicable.

  • Page 132: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Lco Type

    3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 133 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
  • Page 134 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly. Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 135 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
  • Page 136 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Other, 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial.
  • Page 137 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References None Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 138 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network. Value Range 0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 139 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—...
  • Page 140 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range 80 ´...
  • Page 141 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 142 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Selects the frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company. Value Range 12kHz, 16kHz Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type...
  • Page 143 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal.
  • Page 144 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal. Value Range...

  • Page 145: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port

    3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 146: Busy Out Status

    3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 147 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 148 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk. Value Range Low, High Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 149 Programming Manual References 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Pay Tone Detection (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port...
  • Page 150 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 ´...

  • Page 151: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port-Connection Command

    3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection Command Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 152: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type

    3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI (available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
  • Page 153 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´...
  • Page 154 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 155 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 156 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
  • Page 157 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 158 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 159 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T201 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 160 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 161 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 162 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T307 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting. Value Range 0–6000 ´...
  • Page 163 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 164 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 165 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 166 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 167: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port

    3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Main Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 168 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 169 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None LLC Information Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.
  • Page 170 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
  • Page 171 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 172 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 173 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
  • Page 174 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.
  • Page 175 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ISDN Extension Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 176 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 177 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN TE Power Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment). Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 178 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Network Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 179 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 180 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Network Type...
  • Page 181 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 182 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 183 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 184 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Trunk Property...
  • Page 185 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks. Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 186 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 187 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 188 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
  • Page 189 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 190 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
  • Page 191 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 192: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port-Connection Command

    3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection Command Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 193: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 194 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 195 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
  • Page 196 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit character.
  • Page 197 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Setting CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
  • Page 198 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 199 Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
  • Page 200 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.
  • Page 201 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
  • Page 202 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 203 OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 204: Network Configuration

    3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00) Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
  • Page 205 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 206 Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Network Type Selects the network type of the port.
  • Page 207 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References...
  • Page 208 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 209 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 210 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
  • Page 211 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 212 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 213 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
  • Page 214 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

  • Page 215: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/ Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 216: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - T1 Type (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The properties of the T1 card can be specified. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.
  • Page 217 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Send Option Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
  • Page 218 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 219 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´...
  • Page 220 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted. Value Range 3-n (n=0–15) dB Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References...
  • Page 221 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 222 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
  • Page 223 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX) Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 224 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE) Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.
  • Page 225 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Flash—Flash Width (TIE) Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 226 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D...

  • Page 227: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 228 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 229 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 230 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs. Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY...
  • Page 231 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 232 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range 64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal.
  • Page 233 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 234 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s , 2.5 s , 3.5 s , 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 235 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 236: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 237: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type

    3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.
  • Page 238 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 239 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Seizure ACK Wait Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal. Value Range 0.5 ´ n (n=1–20) s Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 240 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Feature Guide References None RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the RAI signal detection mode. Value Range Type 1, Type 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 241 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type...
  • Page 242 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 243 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 244 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 245 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 246: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Line Signal Setting

    3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option-1, Option-3 Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 247 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal. Value Range A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 248 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Forced Release Pattern Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal. Value Range A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1 Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 249 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure Specifies the length of a seizure signal. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 250 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 251 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Value Range A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pulse Detection—Length Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter pulse.
  • Page 252 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal. Value Range -42 - 0 dB –...
  • Page 253 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection—Error Detection Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 254: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 1

    3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
  • Page 255 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Timer—Backward Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone company.
  • Page 256 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 257 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References...
  • Page 258 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [01]–[15] Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively. Value Range Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 259 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 260: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 2

    3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 261 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
  • Page 262 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 263 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 264 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2) Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.
  • Page 265 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Busy Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 266 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of service. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References...
  • Page 267 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 268: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port

    3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 269 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 270 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 E&M-P: Pulsed E & M E&M-C: Continuous E & M Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 271 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Value Range DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2 Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection 1.22.1 E1 Line Service E1 Receiver Type Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
  • Page 272 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time—Out, In Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
  • Page 273 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
  • Page 274 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or E&M-C. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 275 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 276 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code...
  • Page 277 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 278: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port-Connection Command

    3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 279: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Em Type (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The properties for the E & M card can be specified. Interface Selects E & M signal type. Value Range Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 280 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range 32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time.
  • Page 281 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
  • Page 282 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
  • Page 283 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 284 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the PBX as a flash signal. Value Range 8 ´...
  • Page 285 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear Selects the length of a clear pulse.
  • Page 286 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 287 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 288: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel. To change the status of channels, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 289 Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the channel.
  • Page 290 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line.
  • Page 291 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line.
  • Page 292 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
  • Page 293 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private. Value Range...
  • Page 294 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 295 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 296: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 297: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Did Type

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type The property for the DID card can be specified. First Dial Timer Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 298 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type...
  • Page 299 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 300 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 301 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 302: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port

    3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Various settings can be programmed for each DID port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 303 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 304 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 305 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
  • Page 306 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Sending Caller ID to CO Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 307 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 308 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 309: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port-Connection Command

    3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Connection Command Commands for the DID ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 310: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Gateway

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified. En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
  • Page 311 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG Maintenance Port Number (KX-TDA30 only) Specifies the default maintenance port number of the IP network. Value Range 10000–65535 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 312 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 313: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port

    3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 314 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...

  • Page 315: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port-Connection Command

    3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection Command Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 316: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension

    3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings. IP Address Specifies the IP address of the card. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 317 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Keep Alive Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no transmissions from that IP-PT.
  • Page 318 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 319 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Selects whether the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) is used to control echo sound quality. Value Range Use Non-Linear Processor, Use Fixed TX Gain Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References...

  • Page 320: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension-Common Settings

    3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension— Common Settings IP network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS. Gateway Address Specifies the default gateway address of the IP network.
  • Page 321 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 (with the IP-EXT16 card) or 16 (with the IP-EXT4 card) contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here. Value Range 1024–65472 Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 322: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Extension Port

    3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below.
  • Page 323 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Forced De-registration Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT. Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear.
  • Page 324 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
  • Page 325 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 326 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT. Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 327 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

  • Page 328: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Sip Gateway (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only) 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only) The properties of the SIP-GW card can be specified. DSP Expansion Card Indicates whether the SIP-DSP card is installed (reference only). Value Range None, Installed Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only)

  • Page 329: 1-1] Slot-Sip-Gw Port Property (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    3.40 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA30 only) 3.40 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA30 only) Status of the SIP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 330 3.40 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA30 only) Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 331 3.40 [1-1] Slot—SIP-GW Port Property (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 332: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified. To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 333 None Feature Card Type Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only). Note that for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card. Value Range MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card...

  • Page 334: Port Status

    Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot. Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Port Number Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).

  • Page 335: Device Type

    3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Device Type Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only). Value Range Relay, Ringer Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 336 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an SVM card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
  • Page 337 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 338: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed. Puts the card in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 339 3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

  • Page 340: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Option Card Setup (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX. Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.
  • Page 341 3.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Card Inserted Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card...

  • Page 342: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ctilink (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The properties of the CTI-LINK card can be specified. Note that the IP address information must be specified in accordance with the settings of the network that it will be used on.
  • Page 343 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Maintenance Port Number Specifies a port number used to operate Maintenance Console via LAN.

  • Page 344: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Dph Type (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) The status of the DPH ports can be viewed, and set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 345 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References...
  • Page 346 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.

  • Page 347: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Dph Type-Connection Command (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type— Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Commands for the DPH ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only)

  • Page 348: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Esvm Type (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) The properties of the ESVM card can be specified. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 349 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 350: 1-2] Portable Station

    3.48 [1-2] Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), 256 (with the KX-TDA600) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600 with EMEC card installed) PSs can be registered.
  • Page 351 2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX...
  • Page 352 None Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–28 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–128 For KX-TDA600: 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection...
  • Page 353 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...

  • Page 354: 1-3] Option

    3.49 [1-3] Option 3.49 [1-3] Option System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode: Click Clear Master CS. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No. If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode.
  • Page 355 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time.

  • Page 356: 1-4] Clock Priority

    Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards (the PRI, T1, and E1 cards are available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.

  • Page 357: [2] System

    Section 4 [2] System PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 358: 2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

    4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving 4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
  • Page 359 4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 360: 2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving-Date & Time Setting

    4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting 4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).

  • Page 361: 2-2] Operator & Bgm

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.5 Operator Features BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) Selects the audio source of BGM2. Value Range External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2 Maintenance Console Location 4.3 [2-2] Operator &...
  • Page 362 Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Tone, BGM For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2) Maintenance Console Location 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Programming Manual References...
  • Page 363 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Maintenance Console Location 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 364: 2-3] Timers & Counters

    4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0-15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 365 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.

  • Page 366: Dial—Extension First Digit

    4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Dial—Extension First Digit Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 367 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
  • Page 368 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night is set to "0".
  • Page 369 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

  • Page 370: Tone Length—Reorder Tone For Pt Handset

    4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 0 (continuous)–15 s...
  • Page 371 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release 1.11.1 Hands-free Operation DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 372 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
  • Page 373 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing...
  • Page 374 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.) Value Range 0–7 min Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 375 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Doorphone—Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer. Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 376 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 377 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
  • Page 378 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 379 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
  • Page 380 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
  • Page 381 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 382 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 64 + 16 ´...

  • Page 383: Svm—Recording Time

    4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 0 s, 4 s, 8 s Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 4.17 [2-9] System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM—Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.

  • Page 384: Broadcasting—Ring Duration

    4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Broadcasting—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a broadcasting call will ring. The broadcasting call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.

  • Page 385: 2-4] Week Table

    4.5 [2-4] Week Table 4.5 [2-4] Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.

  • Page 386: 2-4] Week Table-Time Setting

    4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting 4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods. 1.
  • Page 387 4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service 2. Break—–Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2.
  • Page 388 4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 389: 2-5] Holiday Table

    4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table 4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. Holiday Table—Setting Enables the setting of the holiday.
  • Page 390 4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 391: 2-6-1] Numbering Plan-Main

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.
  • Page 392 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone. Operator Call Specifies the feature number used to call the operator. Value Range Max.

  • Page 393: Trunk Group Access

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...

  • Page 394: Doorphone Call

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 395: Group Paging

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 396: Ogm Record / Clear / Playback

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main OGM Record / Clear / Playback Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain OGM. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message...

  • Page 397: Directed Call Pickup

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 398: Group Paging Answer

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide References 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

  • Page 399: Account Code Entry

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA. Value Range Max.
  • Page 400 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension. Value Range Max.

  • Page 401: Door Open

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Call Park / Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 402 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.6 [5-4] External Relay...
  • Page 403 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,...
  • Page 404 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—...
  • Page 405 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting.
  • Page 406 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.
  • Page 407 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 408 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.

  • Page 409: Walking Extension

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group...

  • Page 410: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.
  • Page 411 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override...

  • Page 412: Incoming Call Queue Monitor

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display. Value Range Max.
  • Page 413 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message BGM Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook.

  • Page 414: Printing Message

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder...
  • Page 415 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually. Value Range Max.

  • Page 416: Extension Feature Clear

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
  • Page 417 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 418: Simplified Voice Message Access

    4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max.

  • Page 419: Other Pbx Extension

    Leading Number Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed. Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button (reference only).
  • Page 420 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Message Key—Phone Number Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.

  • Page 421: 2-6-2] Numbering Plan-Quick Dial

    A maximum of 80 Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. When an EMEC/MEC card is installed in the PBX, a maximum of 4000 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA30) Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
  • Page 422 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used. Value Range Max.

  • Page 423: 2-6-3] Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature

    4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...

  • Page 424: Call Monitor

    4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References...

  • Page 425: Automatic Callback Busy

    4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes...
  • Page 426 4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 427: 2-7-1] Class Of Service-Cos Settings

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
  • Page 428 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls...

  • Page 429: Transfer To Co

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

  • Page 430: Account Code Mode

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Call Forward to CO Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 431 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 432: Dnd Override

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

  • Page 433: Ohca / Whisper Ohca

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) OHCA / Whisper OHCA Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 434: Executive Busy Override Deny

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—...

  • Page 435: Programming Mode Level

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
  • Page 436 Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
  • Page 437 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

  • Page 438: Door Unlock

    4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— COS Name Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
  • Page 439 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays.
  • Page 440 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Remote Operation by Other Extension Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using DISA).
  • Page 441 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Broadcasting Operation Enables making broadcasting calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-3] Timers &...

  • Page 442: 2-7-2] Class Of Service-External Call Block

    Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies the available trunk groups.

  • Page 443: 2-7-3] Class Of Service-Internal Call Block

    4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block 4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

  • Page 444: 2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Co

    4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 445: 2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone

    4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 446: 2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others

    4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
  • Page 447 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 448 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 449: 2-9] System Options

    4.17 [2-9] System Options 4.17 [2-9] System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 450 4.17 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing...

  • Page 451: Pt Fwd / Dnd—Paging To Dnd Extension

    4.17 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.20.3 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.) Value Range FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
  • Page 452 4.17 [2-9] System Options PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7500, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs. Value Range Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
  • Page 453 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options...
  • Page 454 4.17 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable (Disconnect), Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold Key Mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.
  • Page 455 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 456 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Outgoing Call Type 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing Call Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY...
  • Page 457 4.17 [2-9] System Options Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 458 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Redial—Call Log by Redial key Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options...

  • Page 459: Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

    4.17 [2-9] System Options Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID (FSK) Enables the PBX to adjust its clock every day according to the time information that the network provides with the first call after 3:05 AM. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References...
  • Page 460 4.17 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback 1.15.1 Paging 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
  • Page 461 4.17 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 462 4.17 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 463 Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 1.29.1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel—Conference...
  • Page 464 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 465 4.17 [2-9] System Options Value Range ON or Flash, OFF Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.20.3 LED Indication DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension.
  • Page 466 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold. Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
  • Page 467 4.17 [2-9] System Options Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the Hands-free Answerback feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback...
  • Page 468 4.17 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1.30.6 Network ICD Group Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network.
  • Page 469 Feature Guide References 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

  • Page 470: Whisper Ohca—For Slt / Apt / Kx-T72Xx

    Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options...

  • Page 471: Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting For Extension Call

    4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options...

  • Page 472: Isdn Option—Fwd From Isdn To Isdn

    4.17 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Feature Access—No. 1–8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension. Value Range None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On, External BGM, Paging...
  • Page 473 4.17 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References None Option 6 (CTI) 1st Party CTI—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 474 4.17 [2-9] System Options Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI.
  • Page 475 4.17 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. Value Range 0–60 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 476 4.17 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX’s USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).

  • Page 477: 2-10] Extension Cid Settings

    4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) Specifies a group of 4 SLT ports that can transfer Caller ID information to connected SLTs. When the port to which an extension is connected has this feature activated, there will be a short delay before the extension rings for incoming calls.
  • Page 478 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Value Range 10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 479 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only). Value Range Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings...
  • Page 480 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 481 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings FSK Transmission Level Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation. Value Range -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 482: 2-11-1] Audio Gain-Paging/Moh

    4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH...

  • Page 483: Paging—Paging Level From Pt Speaker

    4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH...
  • Page 484 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 1.13.4 Music on Hold...

  • Page 485: 2-11-2] Audio Gain-Card

    4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card 4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Programming Manual References...
  • Page 486 4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 487: [3] Group

    Section 5 [3] Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 488: 3-1-1] Trunk Group-Trg Settings

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups can be programmed.

  • Page 489: Line Hunting Order

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->...
  • Page 490 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.17 [2-9] System Options 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number). Value Range 1–4 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 491 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None DISA Tone Detection—Silence...

  • Page 492: Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 493: Host Pbx Access Code

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 494 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References None Host PBX Access Code 1–10 Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...
  • Page 495 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

  • Page 496: 3-1-2] Trunk Group-Local Access Priority

    Trunk Group No. & Name Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Trunk Group No. 1–64 For KX-TDA600: Trunk Group No. 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority...

  • Page 497: 3-1-3] Caller Id Modification

    5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
  • Page 498 The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National). Value Range 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 499 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call.
  • Page 500 Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...
  • Page 501 Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...

  • Page 502: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan

    5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
  • Page 503 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 504: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan-Auto Assign

    5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign 5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.

  • Page 505: 3-1-5] Trunk Group-Charge Rate

    5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate 5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.

  • Page 506: 3-2] User Group

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.7 [3-2] User Group Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...

  • Page 507: 3-3] Call Pickup Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
  • Page 508 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 509: 3-3] Call Pickup Group-All Setting

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting...

  • Page 510: 3-4] Paging Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) paging groups can be programmed.
  • Page 511 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 512: 3-4] Paging Group-All Setting

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting...

  • Page 513: 3-4] Paging Group-External

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group External Pager 2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 514 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 515: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
  • Page 516 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Distribution Method Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 517 Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...

  • Page 518: Overflow Queuing Busy

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
  • Page 519 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 520: Overflow No Answer

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Overflow No Answer...
  • Page 521 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.

  • Page 522: Queuing Time Table

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry-up button. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 523 Feature Guide References None Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, Table 1–Table 64 For KX-TDA600: None, Table 1–Table 128 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-4] Week Table...

  • Page 524: Extension No Answer Redirection Time

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 525 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 526 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Last Extension Log-out Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 527 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max.
  • Page 528 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call...
  • Page 529 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
  • Page 530 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 531: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.

  • Page 532: Delayed Ring

    5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Programming Manual References...

  • Page 533: 3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table

    Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

  • Page 534: 3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous

    5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
  • Page 535 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Value Range Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD) Maintenance Console Location 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable.

  • Page 536: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group

    (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
  • Page 537 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References...

  • Page 538: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group-Member List

    5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List 5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.

  • Page 539: 3-7-1] Vm(Dpt) Group-System Settings

    5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
  • Page 540 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period;...

  • Page 541: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings

    5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

  • Page 542: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List

    5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 543 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Value Range For KX-TDA30: For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1, 2 For KX-TDA600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No.
  • Page 544 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Name...

  • Page 545: 3-8-1] Vm(Dtmf) Group-System Settings

    5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 8 (with the KX-TDA600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
  • Page 546 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode. Value Range Max.
  • Page 547 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 548 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
  • Page 549 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Listening Message Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.
  • Page 550 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 551 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.
  • Page 552 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode.
  • Page 553 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others—Mailbox for Extension Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group. Value Range Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 554: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings

    5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 555 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 556: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 557: 3-9] Ps Ring Group

    One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions.
  • Page 558 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Value Range Caller ID, Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 559: 3-9] Ps Ring Group-Member List

    5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list.

  • Page 560: 3-10] Broadcasting Group

    5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group 5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group A broadcasting group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a broadcasting call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple broadcasting groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups.

  • Page 561: 3-10] Broadcasting Group-Member List

    5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List 5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each broadcasting group. Select the group to programme from the Broadcasting Group Number list. To copy the numbers to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK. Dial Number Specifies the destination number of each member of the broadcasting group.
  • Page 562 5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 563: [4] Extension

    Section 6 [4] Extension PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 564: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table.
  • Page 565 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
  • Page 566 S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (BRI) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT) For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only: ISDN: ISDN port (PRI) OPX: T1-OPX port (T1) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 567 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–32 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 568 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the extension. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 569 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 570 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max.
  • Page 571 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy. Value Range Max.
  • Page 572 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References...
  • Page 573 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 574 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings ISDN CLIP Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 575 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
  • Page 576 CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab. CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only). Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—...
  • Page 577 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
  • Page 578 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 579: Wireless Xdp

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 580 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References...
  • Page 581 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max.
  • Page 582 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 583 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 584 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 585 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 586 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 587 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 588 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for...
  • Page 589 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.9.2 Budget Management Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.
  • Page 590 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 591 F-1–F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
  • Page 592 No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-36: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is selected. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
  • Page 593 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode. Value Range Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone...
  • Page 594 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port...
  • Page 595 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect. Value Range Max.
  • Page 596 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 597 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
  • Page 598 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 599 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 600: Display Lock / Svm Lock

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range No Limitation, One-touch Dial Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.

  • Page 601: Paging Deny

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 602 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 603 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 604 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 605 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension’s telephone type as follows: PT: Speech SLT: Audio Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 606 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References...
  • Page 607 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
  • Page 608 4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings— Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port. Value Range Disable, MW-Lamp Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 609 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.19.1 Message Waiting Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when "...
  • Page 610 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References...
  • Page 611 None Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 612 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 613 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS". When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use.
  • Page 614 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) DND Set for Call from CO Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 615 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 616 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 617 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 618: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 619 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
  • Page 620 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 621: 4-1-2] Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd

    6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
  • Page 622 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 623 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Call from Extension—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button. Value Range OFF, FWD, DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
  • Page 624 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from Extension—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 625 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 626: 4-1-3] Wired Extension-Speed Dial

    Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 10 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension, or 100 when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 627: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button

    Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up (KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only), Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 628 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 629 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 630 None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 631 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max.
  • Page 632 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
  • Page 633 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
  • Page 634 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 635 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
  • Page 636 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
  • Page 637 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 638 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range 0–99 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer.
  • Page 639 Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 640 Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 641 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—...
  • Page 642 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Color of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour. Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 643 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Telephone Type Telephone Type Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template. Value Range T7633/T7636, T7625/T7630/NT136, T7665/NT265/NT321, T7667/APT, NT343/NT346/DT343/DT346/ DT333, Other Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...

  • Page 644: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.

  • Page 645: 4-1-5] Wired Extension-Pf Button

    6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button 6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 646: 4-1-6] Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 647: 4-1-7] Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message

    6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 648 If two SVM/ESVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension. Value Range For KX-TDA30: None, Card1, Card2 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 649 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.

  • Page 650: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings

    For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PSs can be programmed. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.7 [3-2] User Group for more details.
  • Page 651 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–32 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 652 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 653 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night...
  • Page 654 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
  • Page 655 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 656 CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab. CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only). Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—...
  • Page 657 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 658 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 659 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 660 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Guide References 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Option 2 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 661 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 662 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 663 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 664 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS. Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message...
  • Page 665 F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
  • Page 666 No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
  • Page 667 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 668 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information...
  • Page 669 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 670: Svm Lock

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions. Value Range Lock, Unlock Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Flexible Button Programming Mode...
  • Page 671 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 672 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 673 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS. Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 674 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.48 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
  • Page 675 Extension Name Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings...
  • Page 676 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension FWD / DND Reference Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
  • Page 677 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None FWD Set for Call from CO Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
  • Page 678 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 679 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 680 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD No Answer Time Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference only). Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References...

  • Page 681: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 682 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
  • Page 683 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 684: 4-2-2] Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd

    6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
  • Page 685 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 686 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Call from Extension—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button. Value Range OFF, FWD, DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
  • Page 687 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from Extension—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 688 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 689: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button

    (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 690 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 691 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 692 The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) on 4.17 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable". Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 693 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 694 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
  • Page 695 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
  • Page 696 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 697 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.
  • Page 698 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station...
  • Page 699 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
  • Page 700 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 701 Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 702 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—...

  • Page 703: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.

  • Page 704: 4-2-4] Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 705: 4-2-5] Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message

    6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 706 Value Range For KX-TDA30: None, Card1, Card2 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B) Maintenance Console Location 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot...

  • Page 707: 4-3] Dss Console

    6.17 [4-3] DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 4 (with the KX-TDA30), 8 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 64 (with the KX-TDA600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type —Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 708 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy Feature Guide References 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–54 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–128 For KX-TDA600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access...
  • Page 709 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 710 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension. Value Range 1–7 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 711 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 712 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only. Value Range Max.
  • Page 713 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
  • Page 714 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 715 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
  • Page 716 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Value Range Max.
  • Page 717 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be specified here.
  • Page 718 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Specifies the ring tone type. Value Range KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/ KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 719 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons, according to the DSS Console you are using.
  • Page 720 Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 721 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 722 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Color of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour. Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 723 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References None Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button. Value Range 4–15 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSS Type DSS Type...

  • Page 724: 4-3] Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy

    6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

  • Page 725: [5] Optional Device

    Section 7 [5] Optional Device PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 726: 5-1] Doorphone

    1.17.1 Doorphone Call Physical Location—Slot Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call...
  • Page 727 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call...
  • Page 728 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 729 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone VM Trunk Group Number Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 730: 5-2] External

    7.2 [5-2] External Pager 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View). Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

  • Page 731: 5-3-1] Voice Message-Disa System

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide. Option 1 DISA Security—DISA Security Mode Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX.

  • Page 732: Disa Intercept—Intercept When All Disa Ports Are Busy

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References...
  • Page 733 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO"...
  • Page 734 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA. Value Range Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
  • Page 735 Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 736 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 737 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the MSG/ESVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS" Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 738 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as a MSG card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.

  • Page 739: 5-3-2] Voice Message-Disa Message

    7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View).
  • Page 740 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No.
  • Page 741 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.17.7 Automatic Fax Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 742: 5-3-3] Voice Message-Svm

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Settings related to the SVM/ESVM cards can be specified, for use with the Simplified Voice Message feature. SVM Card No. 1, 2—Slot No. Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References...

  • Page 743: Remote Access

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the SVM/ESVM card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.
  • Page 744 To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the SVM/ESVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range...
  • Page 745 SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the SVM/ESVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600)to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range 20 ´...
  • Page 746 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 747: 5-4] External Relay

    Settings related to external relays can be programmed. External Relay No. Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 KX-TDA600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References...
  • Page 748 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 749 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Relay Activate Time Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated. Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 750: 5-5] External Sensor

    To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting) External Sensor No. Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 KX-TDA600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References...
  • Page 751 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Physical Location—Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Physical Location—Port...
  • Page 752 1.17.9 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor...

  • Page 753: [6] Feature

    Section 8 [6] Feature PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 754: 6-1] System Speed Dial

    Memory Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table (with MEC [KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200] or EMEC [KX-TDA600] card) depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant.
  • Page 755 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Maintenance Console Location 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number.
  • Page 756 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 1.18.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 757: 6-2] Hotel & Charge

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 758 Bill Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest (Need MEC Card) Activates call billing features for the PBX. Call billing is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed in the PBX. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel &...

  • Page 759: Checkout Billing—Lcd For "Telephone

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max.
  • Page 760 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max.
  • Page 761 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)

  • Page 762: Margin & Tax—Margin Rate For "Telephone

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3 Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill. Value Range Max. 80 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 763 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%) Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 764 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—...

  • Page 765: Charge Options—Action At Charge Limit

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Value Range Head, Tail Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services...
  • Page 766 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 767: 6-3] Verification Code

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.

  • Page 768: Itemised Billing Code For Ars

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently.

  • Page 769: Budget Management

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Programming Manual References 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—...

  • Page 770: 6-4] Second Dial Tone

    8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone 8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.

  • Page 771: 6-5] Absent Message

    8.5 [6-5] Absent Message 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

  • Page 772: 6-6] Tenant

    8.6 [6-6] Tenant 8.6 [6-6] Tenant A maximum of 8 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)/32 (KX-TDA600) tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 773: Ars Mode

    2.2.3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant. This setting is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Basic Memory: PBX basic system speed dialling numbers are used.
  • Page 774 8.6 [6-6] Tenant 2.2.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 775: [7] Trs

    Section 9 [7] TRS PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 776: 7-1] Denied Code

    9.1 [7-1] Denied Code 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 777: 7-2] Exception Code

    9.2 [7-2] Exception Code 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 778: 7-3] Special Carrier

    If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the following digits. A maximum of 20 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 100 (with the KX-TDA600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDA600, 20 codes are displayed at a time. To show other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

  • Page 779: 7-4] Emergency Dial

    9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial 9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code— Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded. A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

  • Page 780: 7-5] Miscellaneous

    9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
  • Page 781 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires. Maintenance Console Location 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
  • Page 782 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

  • Page 783: 10 [8] Ars

    Section 10 [8] ARS PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 784: 8-1] System Setting

    10.1 [8-1] System Setting 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.

  • Page 785: 8-2] Leading Number

    10.2 [8-2] Leading Number 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
  • Page 786 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Routing Plan Number Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 For KX-TDA600: 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

  • Page 787: 8-3] Routing Plan Time

    The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.

  • Page 788: 8-3] Routing Plan Time-Time Setting

    10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

  • Page 789: 8-4] Routing Plan Priority

    Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab. Time-A–Time-D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 1–10 For KX-TDA600: None, 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority...

  • Page 790: 8-5] Carrier

    It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
  • Page 791 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600) Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600) Enables each trunk group for each carrier.
  • Page 792 Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Note For the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only up to 8 tenants are available. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6 [8-5] Carrier...

  • Page 793: 8-6] Leading Number Exception

    10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".

  • Page 794: 8-7] Authorisation Code For Trg

    10.6 [8-5] Carrier. 8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab. Authorisation Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

  • Page 795: 11 [9] Private Network

    Section 11 [9] Private Network PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 796: 9-1] Tie Table

    11.1 [9-1] TIE Table 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
  • Page 797 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 1–64 For KX-TDA600: None, 1–96 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 798 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Centralised VM Leading Number Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network.

  • Page 799: 9-2] Network Data Transmission

    Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data Transfer 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 800 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
  • Page 801 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Value Range 100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms Maintenance Console Location 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
  • Page 802 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 803: 9-3] Network Operator (Voip)

    Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDA600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Undefined, 5–7 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Undefined, 1–11 For KX-TDA600: Undefined, 1-1–4-11 Maintenance Console Location 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
  • Page 804 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 805: 9-4] Ndss Key Table

    11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
  • Page 806 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only). Value Range None, 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References...

  • Page 807: 10] Co & Incoming Call

    Section 12 [10] CO & Incoming Call PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 808: 10-1] Co Line Settings

    12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups. For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and card type to programme, or select "All"...
  • Page 809 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the CO line is connected (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 810: Trunk Group Number

    12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs. Value Range KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group...

  • Page 811: 10-2] Dil Table & Port Settings

    12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
  • Page 812 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).
  • Page 813 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
  • Page 814 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 815 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 816 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY...
  • Page 817 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 818 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 819 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).
  • Page 820 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service.

  • Page 821: 10-3] Ddi / Did Table

    12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
  • Page 822 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 823 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

  • Page 824: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Automatic Registration

    12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed. Value Range 1–1000 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 825 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box.

  • Page 826: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Name Generate

    12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
  • Page 827 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max.

  • Page 828: 10-4] Msn Table

    12.6 [10-4] MSN Table 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night). A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. To use this feature, Access Mode in 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port must be set to P-MP.
  • Page 829 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
  • Page 830 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table...
  • Page 831 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service CLI for MSN When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
  • Page 832 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 833: 10-5] Miscellaneous

    12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.

  • Page 834: Intercept—Intercept Routing For Extension Call

    12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 835: 11] Maintenance

    Section 13 [11] Maintenance PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 836: 11-1] Main

    13.1 [11-1] Main 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main...
  • Page 837 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
  • Page 838 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format. Value Range 12H, 24H Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
  • Page 839 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 840 13.1 [11-1] Main Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.27.2 Room Status Control Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
  • Page 841 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information SMDR Options SMDR Options—ARS Dial Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature. Value Range Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number...
  • Page 842 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Options—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Options—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial.
  • Page 843 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Options—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 844 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Options—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified. Value Range Before Modification, After Modification Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References...
  • Page 845 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Parity Bit Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character.
  • Page 846 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Flow Enables the hardware flow control. Value Range None, Hardware Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Communication—Stop Bit Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character.
  • Page 847 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Max. 30 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming External Modem Command—Manual Initialisation 1–Manual Initialisation 5 Specifies the command to manually initialise an external modem. The command specified here is controlled by PT system programming (External Modem Control [801]).
  • Page 848 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Set Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 849 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 11.2 [9-2] Network Data...
  • Page 850 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Remote Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled. Value Range Max.
  • Page 851 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main...
  • Page 852 13.1 [11-1] Main Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer. System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level Specifies the user level system password to authorise the PT user to access only the permitted system programming.
  • Page 853 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.6 Manager Features System Password - PC Programming—User Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at User Level. This password can only be set in Interactive mode.
  • Page 854 13.1 [11-1] Main System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Installer Level. This password can only be set in Interactive mode. Value Range 4–10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 855: 11-2] Pt Programming Access

    13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access 13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

  • Page 856: 11-3] Power Failure Transfer (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) switches the current connections to Auxiliary Connections, so that certain SLTs and trunks can be connected. Auxiliary Connections allow trunk calls to be made during a power failure.

  • Page 857: Appendix

    Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 858: Revision History

    PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings – Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy –...
  • Page 859 14.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx Changed Contents • 2.5.9 Tool—Import • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type • 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—...

  • Page 860: Kx-Tda600 Plmpr Software File Version 5.0Xxx

    • 2.5 Tool • 2.6 Utility • 3.1 [1-1] Slot • 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings • 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message •...

  • Page 861: Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200 Pmpr Software File Version 3.2Xxx

    New Contents • 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting— Loopback Test started by Network • 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work •...

  • Page 862: Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200 Pmpr Software File Version 5.0Xxx

    14.1.4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx 14.1.4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx New Contents • 2.2 Start Menu Changed Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console • 2.1 Introduction • 2.3 File • 2.4 Disconnect •...

  • Page 863: Kx-Tda30 Psmpr Software File Version 4.0Xxx

    14.1.5 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx 14.1.5 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx New Contents • 2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN • 2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information • 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension • 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings •...
  • Page 864 14.1.5 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx • 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM— SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time • 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 865: Kx-Tda30 Psmpr Software File Version 5.0Xxx

    14.1.6 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx 14.1.6 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx New Contents • 2.2 Start Menu • 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only)— Ringback Tone to Outside Caller • 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - ESVM Type (KX-TDA30 only) Changed Contents •...

  • Page 866: Feature Programming References

    3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
  • Page 867 2.3.5 Automatic Setup Background Music (BGM) • 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features –...
  • Page 868 14.2 Feature Programming References Broadcasting • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Broadcasting—Ring Duration • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Broadcasting Operation • 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Broadcasting Operation • 5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group • 5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Broadcasting Budget Management...
  • Page 869 Call Charge Services • 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type – Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type •...

  • Page 870: Call Hold

    3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...

  • Page 871: Call Park

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN Hold • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN...

  • Page 872: Call Transfer

    3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN...

  • Page 873: Call Waiting

    14.2 Feature Programming References • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway— QSIG-CT Feature Guide References 1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG...
  • Page 874 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – CPC Signal Detection (DDI/DID)—Outgoing, Incoming – CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming •...
  • Page 875 14.2 Feature Programming References – Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – CO Setting— Subscriber Number – Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...
  • Page 876 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG Centralised Voice Mail • 3.49 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralised VM • 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission –...

  • Page 877: Confirmation Tone

    3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG...

  • Page 878: Dial Tone

    3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – Pulse Speed • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – CO Dial Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed • 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port –...
  • Page 879 14.2 Feature Programming References • 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed • 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection...

  • Page 880: Display Information

    14.2 Feature Programming References – DISA—Reorder Tone Duration • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter • 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from DISA • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection –...

  • Page 881: Emergency Call

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Door Open • 3.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Device Type • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration •...

  • Page 882: Extension Dial Lock

    14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings – CO & SMDR— Executive Busy Override – Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override...

  • Page 883: External Sensor

    2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration External Feature Access (EFA) • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Flash Time • 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Flash Time •...

  • Page 884: Flexible Buttons

    14.2 Feature Programming References Flash/Recall/Terminate • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Disconnect Time • 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Disconnect Time • 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...
  • Page 885 14.2 Feature Programming References • 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Floating Ext. No. • 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number • 7.2 [5-2] External Pager— Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number • 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number •...
  • Page 886 14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group Group Call Distribution • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings – Main— Distribution Method – Main— Call Waiting Distribution – Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time –...

  • Page 887: Headset Operation

    14.2 Feature Programming References Headset Operation • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Headset OFF/ON • 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port—IP-PT Registration and De-registration— Headset OFF/ON • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.11.4 Headset Operation...
  • Page 888 • 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port • 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—...

  • Page 889: Intercept Routing

    14.2 Feature Programming References Intercept Routing • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)— Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night •...
  • Page 890 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ISDN Extension • 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Extension Setting Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol •...

  • Page 891: Last Number Redial

    14.2 Feature Programming References KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Last Number Redial • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter –...

  • Page 892: Local Alarm Information

    14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line Feature Guide References 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Local Alarm Information • 2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC •...

  • Page 893: Manager Features

    4.17 [2-9] System Options – Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone – Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— VM DTMF Command—Listening Message • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) •...

  • Page 894: Music On Hold

    1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Music on Hold • 4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold •...

  • Page 895: Operator Features

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.30.6 Network ICD Group Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 •...
  • Page 896 – Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer • 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH – Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only) – Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker •...

  • Page 897: Pause Insertion

    2.3.3 Password Security Pause Insertion • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Pause Time • 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port— Pause Time • 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...
  • Page 898 – Type – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button –...

  • Page 899: Privacy Release

    14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.26.2 Printing Message Privacy Release • 4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.14.1.3 Privacy Release...
  • Page 900 14.2 Feature Programming References – System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level – Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1 Feature Guide References 2.3.2 PT Programming Queuing Feature • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor • 4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation •...

  • Page 901: Ring Tone Pattern Selection

    14.2 Feature Programming References Ring Tone Pattern Selection • 4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 • 4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 • 4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 •...

  • Page 902: T1 Line Service

    Supervisor Extension Number Feature Guide References 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature T1 Line Service • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.23.1 T1 Line Service Tenant Service •...
  • Page 903 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN...

  • Page 904: Time Service

    14.2 Feature Programming References – DDI / DID / TIE / MSN • 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Time Service • 4.5 [2-4] Week Table •...
  • Page 905 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection • 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection • 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection •...
  • Page 906 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer • 4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH – Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only) • 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide References 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

  • Page 907: Verification Code Entry

    1.2.2.5 VIP Call Virtual Private Network (VPN) • 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property • 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property • 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Leading Number •...
  • Page 908 14.2 Feature Programming References Voice Mail (VM) Group • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Unit No. • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Port No. •...

  • Page 909: Voice Mail Dtmf Integration

    14.2 Feature Programming References – VM Trunk Group No. Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Voice Mail DTMF Integration • 4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox •...

  • Page 910: Whisper Ohca

    14.2 Feature Programming References Walking Extension • 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension Feature Guide References 1.28.3 Walking Extension Whisper OHCA • 4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature –...
  • Page 911 Notes PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 912 Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2005...

This manual is also suitable for:

Kx-tda30Kx-tda200Kx-tda600

Table of Contents